xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 8622a0e5)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  *
321  */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
353 
354 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 };
356 
357 /*
358  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
359  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
360  * filtering will be disabled.
361  */
362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
363 
364 /**
365  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
366  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
370  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
371  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
372  */
373 enum ieee80211_event_type {
374 	RSSI_EVENT,
375 	MLME_EVENT,
376 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
377 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 };
379 
380 /**
381  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
382  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
383  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
384  */
385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
387 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
388 };
389 
390 /**
391  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
393  */
394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
395 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
396 };
397 
398 /**
399  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
400  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
403  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404  */
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
406 	AUTH_EVENT,
407 	ASSOC_EVENT,
408 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
409 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 };
411 
412 /**
413  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
414  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
415  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
416  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
417  */
418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
419 	MLME_SUCCESS,
420 	MLME_DENIED,
421 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
422 };
423 
424 /**
425  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
427  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
428  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
429  */
430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
431 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
432 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
433 	u16 reason;
434 };
435 
436 /**
437  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
438  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
439  * @tid: the tid
440  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441  */
442 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
443 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
444 	u16 tid;
445 	u16 ssn;
446 };
447 
448 /**
449  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454  * @u:union holding the fields above
455  */
456 struct ieee80211_event {
457 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
458 	union {
459 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 	} u;
463 };
464 
465 /**
466  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
467  *
468  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
469  *
470  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
471  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
472  */
473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
474 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
475 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
476 };
477 
478 /**
479  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480  *
481  * @lci: LCI subelement content
482  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
483  * @lci_len: LCI data length
484  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
485  */
486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
487 	const u8 *lci;
488 	const u8 *civicloc;
489 	size_t lci_len;
490 	size_t civicloc_len;
491 };
492 
493 /**
494  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
495  *
496  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
497  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
498  *
499  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503  *	ACK, BACK or both
504  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511  * @assoc: association status
512  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
513  *	or not
514  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
515  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
516  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
517  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
518  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
519  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
520  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
521  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
522  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
523  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
524  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
525  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
526  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
527  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
528  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
529  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
530  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
531  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
532  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
533  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
534  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
535  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
536  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
537  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
538  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
539  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
540  *	the current band.
541  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
542  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
543  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
544  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
545  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
546  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
547  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
548  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
549  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
550  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
551  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
552  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
553  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
554  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
555  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
556  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
557  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
558  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
559  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
560  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
561  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
562  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
563  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
564  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
565  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
566  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
567  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
568  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
569  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
570  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
571  *	your driver/device needs to do.
572  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
573  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
574  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
575  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
576  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
577  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
578  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
579  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
580  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
581  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
582  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
583  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
584  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
585  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
586  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
587  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
588  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
589  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
590  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
591  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
592  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
593  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
594  *	station.
595  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
596  *	responder functionality.
597  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
598  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
599  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
600  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
601  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
602  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
603  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
604  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
605  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
606  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
607  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
608  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
609  */
610 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
611 	const u8 *bssid;
612 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
613 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
614 	bool uora_exists;
615 	bool ack_enabled;
616 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
617 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
618 	bool he_support;
619 	bool twt_requester;
620 	bool twt_responder;
621 	/* association related data */
622 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
623 	bool ibss_creator;
624 	u16 aid;
625 	/* erp related data */
626 	bool use_cts_prot;
627 	bool use_short_preamble;
628 	bool use_short_slot;
629 	bool enable_beacon;
630 	u8 dtim_period;
631 	u16 beacon_int;
632 	u16 assoc_capability;
633 	u64 sync_tsf;
634 	u32 sync_device_ts;
635 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
636 	u32 basic_rates;
637 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
638 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
639 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
640 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
641 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
642 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
643 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
644 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
645 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
646 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
647 	int arp_addr_cnt;
648 	bool qos;
649 	bool idle;
650 	bool ps;
651 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
652 	size_t ssid_len;
653 	bool hidden_ssid;
654 	int txpower;
655 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
656 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
657 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
658 	u16 max_idle_period;
659 	bool protected_keep_alive;
660 	bool ftm_responder;
661 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
662 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
663 	bool nontransmitted;
664 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
665 	u8 bssid_index;
666 	u8 bssid_indicator;
667 	bool ema_ap;
668 	u8 profile_periodicity;
669 	struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
670 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
671 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
672 };
673 
674 /**
675  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
676  *
677  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
678  *
679  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
680  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
681  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
682  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
683  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
684  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
685  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
686  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
687  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
688  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
689  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
690  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
691  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
693  *	station
694  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
695  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
697  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
698  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
699  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
700  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
701  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
702  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
703  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
704  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
705  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
706  *	hardware queue.
707  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
708  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
709  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
711  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
712  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
713  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
714  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
715  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
716  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
717  *	off-channel operation.
718  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
719  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
720  *	it can be sent out.
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
722  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
724  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
726  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
727  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
729  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
730  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
731  *	queue gets full.
732  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
733  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
734  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
736  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
737  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
739  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
740  *	status to user space)
741  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
742  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
743  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
744  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
745  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
746  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
747  *	handled properly by the device.
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
749  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
750  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
752  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
753  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
755  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
756  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
757  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
758  *	PS-Poll responses.
759  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
760  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
761  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
762  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
763  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
764  *	monitor injection).
765  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
766  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
767  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
768  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
769  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
770  *
771  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
772  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
773  */
774 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
775 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
804 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
805 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
806 };
807 
808 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
809 
810 /**
811  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
812  *
813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
814  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
816  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
819  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
821  *
822  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
823  */
824 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP	= BIT(6),
832 };
833 
834 /*
835  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
836  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
837  */
838 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
841 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
842 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
843 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
844 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
845 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
846 
847 /**
848  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
849  *	Rate Control algorithm.
850  *
851  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
852  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
853  *
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
856  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
857  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
859  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
860  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
862  *	Greenfield mode.
863  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
865  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
866  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
867  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
868  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
869  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
870  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
871  */
872 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
873 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
874 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
875 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
876 
877 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
878 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
880 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
883 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
884 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
885 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
886 };
887 
888 
889 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
891 
892 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
894 
895 /* maximum number of rate stages */
896 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
897 
898 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
899 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
900 
901 /**
902  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
903  *
904  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
905  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
906  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
907  *
908  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
909  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
910  *
911  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
912  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
913  *
914  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
915  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
916  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
917  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
918  * information::
919  *
920  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
921  *
922  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
923  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
924  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
925  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
926  * information should then contain::
927  *
928  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
929  *
930  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
931  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
932  */
933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
934 	s8 idx;
935 	u16 count:5,
936 	    flags:11;
937 } __packed;
938 
939 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
940 
941 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
942 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
943 {
944 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
945 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
946 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
947 }
948 
949 static inline u8
950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
951 {
952 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
953 }
954 
955 static inline u8
956 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
957 {
958 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
959 }
960 
961 /**
962  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
963  *
964  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
965  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
966  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
967  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
968  *
969  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
970  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
971  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
972  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
973  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
974  * @control: union part for control data
975  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
976  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
977  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
978  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
979  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
980  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
981  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
982  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
983  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
984  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
985  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
986  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
987  * @pad: padding
988  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
989  * @status: union part for status data
990  * @status.rates: attempted rates
991  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
992  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
993  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
994  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
995  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
996  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
997  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
998  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
999  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1000  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1001  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1002  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1003  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1004  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1005  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1006  */
1007 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1008 	/* common information */
1009 	u32 flags;
1010 	u32 band:3,
1011 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1012 	    hw_queue:4,
1013 	    tx_time_est:10;
1014 	/* 2 free bits */
1015 
1016 	union {
1017 		struct {
1018 			union {
1019 				/* rate control */
1020 				struct {
1021 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1022 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1023 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1024 					u8 use_rts:1;
1025 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1026 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1027 					u8 skip_table:1;
1028 					/* 2 bytes free */
1029 				};
1030 				/* only needed before rate control */
1031 				unsigned long jiffies;
1032 			};
1033 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1034 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1035 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1036 			u32 flags;
1037 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1038 		} control;
1039 		struct {
1040 			u64 cookie;
1041 		} ack;
1042 		struct {
1043 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1044 			s32 ack_signal;
1045 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1046 			u8 ampdu_len;
1047 			u8 antenna;
1048 			u16 tx_time;
1049 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1050 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1051 		} status;
1052 		struct {
1053 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1054 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1055 			u8 pad[4];
1056 
1057 			void *rate_driver_data[
1058 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1059 		};
1060 		void *driver_data[
1061 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1062 	};
1063 };
1064 
1065 static inline u16
1066 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1067 {
1068 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1069 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1070 	 */
1071 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1072 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1073 }
1074 
1075 static inline u16
1076 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1077 {
1078 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1079 }
1080 
1081 /**
1082  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1083  *
1084  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1085  * @info: Basic tx status information
1086  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1087  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1088  */
1089 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1090 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1091 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1092 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1093 	struct rate_info *rate;
1094 };
1095 
1096 /**
1097  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1098  *
1099  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1100  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1101  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1102  *
1103  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1104  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1105  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1106  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1107  */
1108 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1109 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1110 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1111 	const u8 *common_ies;
1112 	size_t common_ie_len;
1113 };
1114 
1115 
1116 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1117 {
1118 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1119 }
1120 
1121 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1122 {
1123 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1124 }
1125 
1126 /**
1127  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1128  *
1129  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1130  *
1131  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1132  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1133  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1134  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1135  *
1136  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1137  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1138  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1139  */
1140 static inline void
1141 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1142 {
1143 	int i;
1144 
1145 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1146 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1147 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1148 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1149 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1150 	/* clear the rate counts */
1151 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1152 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1153 
1154 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1155 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1156 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1157 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1158 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1159 }
1160 
1161 
1162 /**
1163  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1164  *
1165  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1166  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1167  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1169  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1170  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1171  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1172  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1173  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1174  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1175  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1176  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1177  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1178  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1179  *	de-duplication by itself.
1180  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1181  *	the frame.
1182  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1183  *	the frame.
1184  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1185  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1186  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1187  *	merging.
1188  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1190  *	(including FCS) was received.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1192  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1193  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1194  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1195  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1196  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1197  *	each A-MPDU
1198  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1199  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1200  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1201  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1202  *	on this subframe
1203  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1204  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1205  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1206  *	done by the hardware
1207  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1208  *	processing it in any regular way.
1209  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1210  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1211  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1212  *	monitor interfaces.
1213  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1214  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1215  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1216  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1217  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1218  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1219  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1220  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1221  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1222  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1223  *	interleaved with other frames.
1224  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1225  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1226  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1227  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1228  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1229  *	the first subframe.
1230  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1231  *	be done in the hardware.
1232  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1233  *	frame
1234  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1235  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1236  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1237  *
1238  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1239  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1240  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1241  *	 - DATA5_GI
1242  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1243  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1244  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1245  *
1246  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1247  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1248  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1249  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1250  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1251  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1252  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1253  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1254  */
1255 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1256 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1257 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1258 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1259 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1260 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1261 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1262 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1263 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1264 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1265 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1266 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1267 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1268 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1269 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1270 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1271 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1272 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1273 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1274 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1275 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1276 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1277 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1278 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1279 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1280 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1281 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1282 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1283 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1284 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1285 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1286 };
1287 
1288 /**
1289  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1290  *
1291  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1292  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1293  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1294  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1295  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1296  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1297  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1298  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1299  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1300  */
1301 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1302 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1303 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1304 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1305 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1306 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1307 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1308 };
1309 
1310 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1311 
1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1313 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1314 	RX_ENC_HT,
1315 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1316 	RX_ENC_HE,
1317 };
1318 
1319 /**
1320  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1321  *
1322  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1323  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1324  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1325  *
1326  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1327  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1328  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1329  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1330  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1331  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1332  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1333  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1334  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1335  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1336  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1337  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1338  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1339  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1340  *	values were filled.
1341  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1342  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1343  * @antenna: antenna used
1344  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1345  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1346  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1347  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1348  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1349  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1350  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1351  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1352  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1353  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1354  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1355  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1356  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1357  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1358  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1359  */
1360 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1361 	u64 mactime;
1362 	u64 boottime_ns;
1363 	u32 device_timestamp;
1364 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1365 	u32 flag;
1366 	u16 freq;
1367 	u8 enc_flags;
1368 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1369 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1370 	u8 rate_idx;
1371 	u8 nss;
1372 	u8 rx_flags;
1373 	u8 band;
1374 	u8 antenna;
1375 	s8 signal;
1376 	u8 chains;
1377 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1378 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1379 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1380 };
1381 
1382 /**
1383  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1384  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1385  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1386  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1387  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1388  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1389  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1390  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1391  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1392  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1393  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1394  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1395  *	@data field.
1396  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1397  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1398  *	length
1399  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1400  *
1401  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1402  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1403  * data.
1404  */
1405 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1406 	u32 present;
1407 	u8 align;
1408 	u8 oui[3];
1409 	u8 subns;
1410 	u8 pad;
1411 	u16 len;
1412 	u8 data[];
1413 } __packed;
1414 
1415 /**
1416  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1417  *
1418  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1419  *
1420  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1421  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1422  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1423  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1424  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1425  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1426  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1427  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1428  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1429  *	for more.
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1431  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1432  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1433  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1434  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1436  *	operating channel.
1437  */
1438 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1439 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1440 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1441 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1442 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1443 };
1444 
1445 
1446 /**
1447  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1448  *
1449  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1450  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1451  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1452  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1453  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1454  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1455  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1456  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1457  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1458  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1459  */
1460 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1461 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1462 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1463 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1464 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1465 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1466 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1467 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1468 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1469 };
1470 
1471 /**
1472  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1473  *
1474  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1475  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1476  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1477  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1478  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1479  */
1480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1481 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1482 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1483 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1484 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1485 
1486 	/* keep last */
1487 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1488 };
1489 
1490 /**
1491  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1492  *
1493  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1494  *
1495  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1496  *
1497  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1498  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1499  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1500  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1501  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1502  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1503  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1504  *
1505  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1506  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1507  *
1508  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1509  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1510  *
1511  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1512  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1513  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1514  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1515  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1516  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1517  *
1518  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1519  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1520  *	configured for an HT channel.
1521  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1522  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1523  */
1524 struct ieee80211_conf {
1525 	u32 flags;
1526 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1527 
1528 	u16 listen_interval;
1529 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1530 
1531 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1532 
1533 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1534 	bool radar_enabled;
1535 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1536 };
1537 
1538 /**
1539  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1540  *
1541  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1542  * operation.
1543  *
1544  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1545  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1546  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1547  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1548  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1549  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1550  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1551  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1552  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1553  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1554  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1555   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1556   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1557  */
1558 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1559 	u64 timestamp;
1560 	u32 device_timestamp;
1561 	bool block_tx;
1562 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1563 	u8 count;
1564 	u32 delay;
1565 };
1566 
1567 /**
1568  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1569  *
1570  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1571  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1572  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1573  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1574  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1575  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1576  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1577  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1578  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1579  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1580  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1581  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1582  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1583  */
1584 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1585 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1586 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1587 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1588 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1589 };
1590 
1591 /**
1592  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1593  *
1594  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1595  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1596  *
1597  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1598  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1599  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1600  * @addr: address of this interface
1601  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1602  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1603  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1604  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1605  *	for read access.
1606  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1607  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1608  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1609  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1610  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1611  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1612  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1613  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1614  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1615  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1616  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1617  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1618  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1619  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1620  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1621  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1622  *	interface.
1623  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1624  *	sizeof(void \*).
1625  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1626  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1627  *	protected by fq->lock.
1628  */
1629 struct ieee80211_vif {
1630 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1631 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1632 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1633 	bool p2p;
1634 	bool csa_active;
1635 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1636 
1637 	u8 cab_queue;
1638 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1639 
1640 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1641 
1642 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1643 
1644 	u32 driver_flags;
1645 
1646 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1647 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1648 #endif
1649 
1650 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1651 
1652 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1653 
1654 	/* must be last */
1655 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1656 };
1657 
1658 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1659 {
1660 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1661 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1662 #endif
1663 	return false;
1664 }
1665 
1666 /**
1667  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1668  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1669  *
1670  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1671  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1672  *
1673  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1674  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1675  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1676  */
1677 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1678 
1679 /**
1680  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1681  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1682  *
1683  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1684  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1685  *
1686  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1687  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1688  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1689  */
1690 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1691 
1692 /**
1693  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1694  *
1695  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1696  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1697  *
1698  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1699  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1700  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1701  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1702  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1703  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1704  *	generation in software.
1705  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1706  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1707  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1708  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1709  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1710  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1711  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1712  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1713  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1714  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1715  *	MIC.
1716  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1717  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1718  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1719  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1720  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1721  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1722  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1723  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1724  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1725  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1726  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1727  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1728  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1729  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1730  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1731  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1732  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1733  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1734  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1735  *	generation only
1736  */
1737 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1738 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1739 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1740 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1741 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1742 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1743 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1744 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1745 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1746 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1747 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1748 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1749 };
1750 
1751 /**
1752  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1753  *
1754  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1755  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1756  *
1757  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1758  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1759  *	encrypted in hardware.
1760  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1761  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1762  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1763  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1764  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1765  * @keylen: key material length
1766  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1767  * 	data block:
1768  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1769  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1770  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1771  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1772  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1773  */
1774 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1775 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1776 	u32 cipher;
1777 	u8 icv_len;
1778 	u8 iv_len;
1779 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1780 	s8 keyidx;
1781 	u16 flags;
1782 	u8 keylen;
1783 	u8 key[0];
1784 };
1785 
1786 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1787 
1788 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1789 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1790 
1791 /**
1792  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1793  *
1794  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1795  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1796  *	reverse order than in packet)
1797  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1798  *	reverse order than in packet)
1799  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1800  *	reverse order than in packet)
1801  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1802  *	reverse order than in packet)
1803  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1804  */
1805 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1806 	union {
1807 		struct {
1808 			u32 iv32;
1809 			u16 iv16;
1810 		} tkip;
1811 		struct {
1812 			u8 pn[6];
1813 		} ccmp;
1814 		struct {
1815 			u8 pn[6];
1816 		} aes_cmac;
1817 		struct {
1818 			u8 pn[6];
1819 		} aes_gmac;
1820 		struct {
1821 			u8 pn[6];
1822 		} gcmp;
1823 		struct {
1824 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1825 			u8 seq_len;
1826 		} hw;
1827 	};
1828 };
1829 
1830 /**
1831  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1832  *
1833  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1834  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1835  *
1836  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1837  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1838  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1839  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1840  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1841  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1842  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1843  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1844  *     key_idx value calculation:
1845  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1846  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1847  */
1848 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1849 	u32 cipher;
1850 	u16 iftype;
1851 	u8 hdr_len;
1852 	u8 pn_len;
1853 	u8 pn_off;
1854 	u8 key_idx_off;
1855 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1856 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1857 	u8 mic_len;
1858 };
1859 
1860 /**
1861  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1862  *
1863  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1864  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1865  *
1866  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1867  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1868  */
1869 enum set_key_cmd {
1870 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1871 };
1872 
1873 /**
1874  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1875  *
1876  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1877  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1878  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1879  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1880  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1881  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1882  */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1884 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1885 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1886 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1887 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1888 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1889 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1890 };
1891 
1892 /**
1893  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1894  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1895  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1896  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1897  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1898  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1899  *
1900  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1901  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1902  */
1903 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1904 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1905 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1906 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1907 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1908 };
1909 
1910 /**
1911  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1912  *
1913  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1914  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1915  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1916  */
1917 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1918 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1919 	struct {
1920 		s8 idx;
1921 		u8 count;
1922 		u8 count_cts;
1923 		u8 count_rts;
1924 		u16 flags;
1925 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1926 };
1927 
1928 /**
1929  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1930  *
1931  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1932  *
1933  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1934  *	to the STA.
1935  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1936  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1937  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1938  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1939  *	per peer TPC.
1940  */
1941 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1942 	s16 power;
1943 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1944 };
1945 
1946 /**
1947  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1948  *
1949  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1950  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1951  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1952  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1953  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1954  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1955  *
1956  * @addr: MAC address
1957  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1958  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1959  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1960  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1961  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1962  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1963  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1964  *	Can be modified by driver.
1965  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1966  *	otherwise always false)
1967  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1968  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1969  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1970  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1971  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1972  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1973  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1974  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1975  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1976  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1977  *	the station moves to associated state.
1978  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1979  * @rates: rate control selection table
1980  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1981  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1982  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1983  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1984  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1985  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1986  *	unlimited.
1987  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1988  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1989  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1990  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1991  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1992  */
1993 struct ieee80211_sta {
1994 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1995 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1996 	u16 aid;
1997 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1998 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1999 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2000 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2001 	bool wme;
2002 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2003 	u8 max_sp;
2004 	u8 rx_nss;
2005 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2006 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2007 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2008 	bool tdls;
2009 	bool tdls_initiator;
2010 	bool mfp;
2011 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2012 
2013 	/**
2014 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2015 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2016 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2017 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2018 	 *
2019 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2020 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2021 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2022 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2023 	 *
2024 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2025 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2026 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2027 	 */
2028 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2029 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2030 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2031 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2032 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2033 
2034 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2035 
2036 	/* must be last */
2037 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2038 };
2039 
2040 /**
2041  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2042  *
2043  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2044  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2045  *
2046  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2047  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2048  */
2049 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2050 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2051 };
2052 
2053 /**
2054  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2055  *
2056  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2057  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2058  */
2059 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2060 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2061 };
2062 
2063 /**
2064  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2065  *
2066  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2067  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2068  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2069  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2070  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2071  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2072  *
2073  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2074  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2075  */
2076 struct ieee80211_txq {
2077 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2078 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2079 	u8 tid;
2080 	u8 ac;
2081 
2082 	/* must be last */
2083 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2084 };
2085 
2086 /**
2087  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2088  *
2089  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2090  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2091  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2092  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2093  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2094  *
2095  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2096  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2097  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2098  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2099  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2100  *	algorithm.
2101  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2102  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2103  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2104  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2105  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2106  *	CCK frames.
2107  *
2108  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2109  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2110  *	the FCS at the end.
2111  *
2112  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2113  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2114  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2115  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2116  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2117  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2118  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2119  *
2120  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2121  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2122  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2123  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2124  *
2125  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2126  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2127  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2128  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2129  *
2130  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2131  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2132  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2135  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2136  *
2137  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2138  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2139  *
2140  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2141  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2142  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2143  *
2144  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2145  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2146  *
2147  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2148  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2149  *
2150  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2151  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2152  *	the stack.
2153  *
2154  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2155  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2156  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2157  *
2158  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2159  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2160  *	dtim_period).
2161  *
2162  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2163  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2164  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2165  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2166  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2167  *	only in that case.
2168  *
2169  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2170  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2171  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2172  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2173  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2174  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2175  *
2176  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2177  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2178  *	software.
2179  *
2180  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2181  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2182  *	active interfaces.
2183  *
2184  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2185  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2186  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2187  *
2188  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2189  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2190  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2191  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2192  *	supported cipher suites.
2193  *
2194  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2195  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2196  *	for frames.
2197  *
2198  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2199  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2200  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2201  *	control for more details.
2202  *
2203  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2204  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2205  *
2206  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2207  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2208  *	is supported.
2209  *
2210  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2211  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2212  *
2213  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2214  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2215  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2216  *
2217  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2218  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2219  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2220  *	CSA frame.
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2223  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2224  *
2225  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2226  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2227  *
2228  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2229  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2230  *
2231  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2232  *	within A-MPDU.
2233  *
2234  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2235  *	for sent beacons.
2236  *
2237  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2238  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2239  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2240  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2241  *
2242  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2243  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2244  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2245  *	timeout.
2246  *
2247  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2248  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2249  *
2250  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2251  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2252  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2253  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2254  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2255  *
2256  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2257  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2258  *
2259  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2260  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2261  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2262  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2263  *
2264  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2265  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2266  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2267  *
2268  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2269  *	TDLS links.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2272  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2273  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2274  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2275  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2276  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2277  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2278  *
2279  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2280  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2281  *
2282  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2283  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2284  *
2285  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2286  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2287  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2288  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2289  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2290  *
2291  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2292  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2293  *	TXQs to start with.
2294  *
2295  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2296  *	length in tx status information
2297  *
2298  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2299  *
2300  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2301  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2302  *
2303  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2304  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2305  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2306  *
2307  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2308  */
2309 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2310 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2339 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2340 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2341 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2342 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2343 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2344 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2345 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2346 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2347 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2348 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2349 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2350 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2351 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2352 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2353 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2354 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2355 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2356 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2357 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2358 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2359 
2360 	/* keep last, obviously */
2361 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2362 };
2363 
2364 /**
2365  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2366  *
2367  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2368  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2369  *
2370  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2371  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2372  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2373  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2374  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2375  *
2376  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2377  *
2378  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2379  *	along with this structure.
2380  *
2381  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2382  *
2383  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2384  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2385  *
2386  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2387  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2388  *
2389  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2390  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2391  *
2392  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2393  *	that HW supports
2394  *
2395  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2396  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2397  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2398  *
2399  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2400  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2401  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2402  *
2403  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2404  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2405  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2406  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2407  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2408  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2409  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2410  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2411  *
2412  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2413  *	can handle.
2414  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2415  *	the hw can report back.
2416  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2417  *
2418  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2419  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2420  *	aggregation.
2421  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2422  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2423  *	it shouldn't be set.
2424  *
2425  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2426  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2427  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2428  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2429  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2430  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2431  *
2432  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2433  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2434  *
2435  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2436  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2437  *
2438  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2439  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2440  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2441  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2442  *
2443  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2444  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2445  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2446  *
2447  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2448  *
2449  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2450  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2451  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2452  *	device_timestamp.
2453  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2454  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2455  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2456  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2457  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2458  *
2459  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2460  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2461  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2462  *
2463  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2464  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2465  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2466  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2467  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2468  *	neither enabled.
2469  *
2470  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2471  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2472  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2473  *
2474  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2475  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2476  *	supported by HW.
2477  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2478  *	device.
2479  *
2480  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2481  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2482  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2483  *
2484  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2485  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2486  *
2487  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2488  */
2489 struct ieee80211_hw {
2490 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2491 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2492 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2493 	void *priv;
2494 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2495 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2496 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2497 	int vif_data_size;
2498 	int sta_data_size;
2499 	int chanctx_data_size;
2500 	int txq_data_size;
2501 	u16 queues;
2502 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2503 	s8 max_signal;
2504 	u8 max_rates;
2505 	u8 max_report_rates;
2506 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2507 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2508 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2509 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2510 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2511 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2512 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2513 	struct {
2514 		int units_pos;
2515 		s16 accuracy;
2516 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2517 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2518 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2519 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2520 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2521 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2522 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2523 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2524 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2525 	u32 max_mtu;
2526 };
2527 
2528 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2529 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2530 {
2531 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2532 }
2533 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2534 
2535 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2536 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2537 {
2538 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2539 }
2540 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2541 
2542 /**
2543  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2544  *
2545  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2546  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2547  */
2548 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2549 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2550 
2551 	/* Keep last */
2552 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2553 };
2554 
2555 /**
2556  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2557  *
2558  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2559  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2560  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2561  * @status: channel-switch response status
2562  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2563  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2564  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2565  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2566  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2567  */
2568 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2569 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2570 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2571 	u8 action_code;
2572 	u32 status;
2573 	u32 timestamp;
2574 	u16 switch_time;
2575 	u16 switch_timeout;
2576 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2577 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2578 };
2579 
2580 /**
2581  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2582  *
2583  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2584  *
2585  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2586  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2587  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2588  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2589  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2590  *
2591  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2592  */
2593 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2594 
2595 /**
2596  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2597  *
2598  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2599  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2600  */
2601 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2602 {
2603 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2604 }
2605 
2606 /**
2607  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2608  *
2609  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2610  * @addr: the address to set
2611  */
2612 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2613 {
2614 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2615 }
2616 
2617 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2618 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2619 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2620 {
2621 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2622 		return NULL;
2623 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2624 }
2625 
2626 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2627 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2628 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2629 {
2630 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2631 		return NULL;
2632 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2633 }
2634 
2635 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2636 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2637 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2638 {
2639 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2640 		return NULL;
2641 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2642 }
2643 
2644 /**
2645  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2646  * @hw: the hardware
2647  * @skb: the skb
2648  *
2649  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2650  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2651  */
2652 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2653 
2654 /**
2655  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2656  *
2657  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2658  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2659  *
2660  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2661  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2662  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2663  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2664  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2665  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2666  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2667  *
2668  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2669  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2670  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2671  *
2672  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2673  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2674  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2675  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2676  *
2677  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2678  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2679  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2680  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2681  *
2682  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2683  *
2684  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2685  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2686  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2687  * based on the receive flags.
2688  *
2689  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2690  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2691  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2692  * keys.
2693  *
2694  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2695  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2696  * handler.
2697  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2698  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2699  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2700  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2701  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2702  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2703  *
2704  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2705  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2706  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2707  *
2708  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2709  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2710  * requirements:
2711  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2712       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2713       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2714    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2715       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2716    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2717       encrypted with the new key and
2718    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2719    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2720  */
2721 
2722 /**
2723  * DOC: Powersave support
2724  *
2725  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2726  *
2727  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2728  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2729  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2730  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2731  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2732  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2733  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2734  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2735  *
2736  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2737  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2738  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2739  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2740  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2741  *
2742  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2743  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2744  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2745  *
2746  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2747  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2748  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2749  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2750  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2751  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2752  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2753  *
2754  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2755  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2756  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2757  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2758  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2759  * periods.
2760  *
2761  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2762  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2763  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2764  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2765  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2766  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2767  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2768  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2769  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2770  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2771  *
2772  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2773  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2774  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2775  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2776  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2777  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2778  *
2779  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2780  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2781  */
2782 
2783 /**
2784  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2785  *
2786  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2787  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2788  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2789  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2790  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2791  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2792  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2793  *
2794  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2795  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2796  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2797  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2798  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2799  *
2800  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2801  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2802  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2803  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2804  *
2805  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2806  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2807  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2808  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2809  *
2810  *  - a list of information element IDs
2811  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2812  *
2813  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2814  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2815  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2816  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2817  * vendor information elements.
2818  *
2819  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2820  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2821  *
2822  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2823  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2824  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2825  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2826  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2827  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2828  *
2829  *
2830  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2831  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2832  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2833  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2834  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2835  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2836  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2837  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2838  *
2839  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2840  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2841  * signal strength threshold checking.
2842  */
2843 
2844 /**
2845  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2846  *
2847  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2848  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2849  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2850  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2851  *
2852  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2853  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2854  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2855  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2856  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2857  * hardware flags.
2858  *
2859  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2860  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2861  * turned off otherwise.
2862  *
2863  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2864  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2865  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2866  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2867  */
2868 
2869 /**
2870  * DOC: Frame filtering
2871  *
2872  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2873  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2874  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2875  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2876  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2877  *
2878  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2879  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2880  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2881  *
2882  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2883  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2884  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2885  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2886  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2887  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2888  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2889  *
2890  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2891  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2892  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2893  * or dropped.
2894  *
2895  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2896  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2897  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2898  * the flag, but not clear it.
2899  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2900  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2901  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2902  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2903  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2904  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2905  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2906  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2907  */
2908 
2909 /**
2910  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2911  *
2912  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2913  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2914  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2915  *
2916  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2917  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2918  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2919  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2920  * the driver code.
2921  *
2922  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2923  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2924  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2925  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2926  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2927  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2928  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2929  *
2930  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2931  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2932  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2933  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2934  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2935  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2936  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2937  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2938  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2939  * @sta_notify callback.
2940  *
2941  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2942  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2943  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2944  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2945  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2946  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2947  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2948  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2949  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2950  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2951  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2952  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2953  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2954  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2955  *
2956  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2957  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2958  *
2959  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2960  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2961  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2962  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2963  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2964  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2965  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2966  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2967  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2968  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2969  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2970  *
2971  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2972  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2973  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2974  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2975  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2976  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2977  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2978  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2979  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2980  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2981  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2982  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2983  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2984  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2985  *
2986  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2987  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2988  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2989  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2990  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2991  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2992  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2993  *
2994  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2995  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2996  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2997  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2998  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2999  *
3000  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3001  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3002  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3003  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3004  */
3005 
3006 /**
3007  * DOC: HW queue control
3008  *
3009  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3010  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3011  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3012  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3013  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3014  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3015  *
3016  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3017  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3018  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3019  *
3020  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3021  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3022  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3023  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3024  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3025  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3026  * the hardware queue.
3027  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3028  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3029  *
3030  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3031  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3032  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3033  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3034  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3035  *
3036  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3037  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3038  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3039  * off-channel queue:         9
3040  *
3041  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3042  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3043  *
3044  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3045  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3046  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3047  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3048  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3049  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3050  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3051  *
3052  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3053  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3054  *
3055  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3056  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3057  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3058  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3059  */
3060 
3061 /**
3062  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3063  *
3064  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3065  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3066  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3067  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3068  *
3069  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3070  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3071  *	multicast address.
3072  *
3073  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3074  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3075  *
3076  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3077  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3078  *
3079  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3080  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3081  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3082  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3083  *	honour this flag if possible.
3084  *
3085  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3086  *	station
3087  *
3088  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3089  *
3090  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3091  *
3092  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3093  */
3094 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3095 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3096 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3097 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3098 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3099 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3100 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3101 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3102 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3103 };
3104 
3105 /**
3106  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3107  *
3108  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3109  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3110  *
3111  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3112  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3113  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3114  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3115  *
3116  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3117  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3118  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3119  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special
3120  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3121  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3122  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3123  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3124  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3125  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3126  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3127  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3128  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3129  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3130  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3131  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3132  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3133  */
3134 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3135 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3136 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3137 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3138 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3139 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3140 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3141 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3142 };
3143 
3144 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3145 
3146 /**
3147  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3148  *
3149  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3150  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3151  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3152  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3153  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3154  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3155  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3156  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3157  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3158  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3159  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3160  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3161  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3162  */
3163 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3164 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3165 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3166 	u16 tid;
3167 	u16 ssn;
3168 	u16 buf_size;
3169 	bool amsdu;
3170 	u16 timeout;
3171 };
3172 
3173 /**
3174  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3175  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3176  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3177  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3178  */
3179 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3180 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3181 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3182 };
3183 
3184 /**
3185  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3186  *
3187  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3188  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3189  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3190  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3191  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3192  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3193  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3194  *	the peer.
3195  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3196  *	by the peer
3197  */
3198 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3199 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3200 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3201 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3202 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3203 };
3204 
3205 /**
3206  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3207  *
3208  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3209  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3210  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3211  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3212  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3213  *
3214  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3215  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3216  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3217  */
3218 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3219 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3220 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3221 };
3222 
3223 /**
3224  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3225  *
3226  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3227  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3228  *
3229  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3230  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3231  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3232  *	of wowlan configuration)
3233  */
3234 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3235 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3236 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3237 };
3238 
3239 /**
3240  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3241  *
3242  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3243  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3244  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3245  *
3246  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3247  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3248  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3249  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3250  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3251  *	Must be atomic.
3252  *
3253  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3254  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3255  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3256  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3257  *	or zero.
3258  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3259  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3260  *	is added.
3261  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3262  *
3263  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3264  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3265  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3266  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3267  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3268  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3269  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3270  *
3271  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3272  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3273  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3274  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3275  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3276  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3277  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3278  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3279  *	must return 1 from this function.
3280  *
3281  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3282  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3283  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3284  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3285  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3286  *
3287  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3288  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3289  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3290  *	in suspend().
3291  *
3292  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3293  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3294  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3295  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3296  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3297  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3298  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3299  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3300  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3301  *
3302  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3303  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3304  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3305  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3306  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3307  *
3308  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3309  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3310  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3311  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3312  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3313  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3314  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3315  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3316  *
3317  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3318  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3319  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3320  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3321  *
3322  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3323  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3324  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3325  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3326  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3327  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3328  *	can sleep.
3329  *
3330  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3331  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3332  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3333  *
3334  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3335  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3336  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3337  *
3338  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3339  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3340  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3341  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3342  *	which flags are changed.
3343  *	This callback can sleep.
3344  *
3345  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3346  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3347  *
3348  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3349  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3350  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3351  *	is enabled.
3352  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3353  *	The callback can sleep.
3354  *
3355  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3356  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3357  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3358  *	The callback must be atomic.
3359  *
3360  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3361  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3362  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3363  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3364  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3365  *
3366  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3367  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3368  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3369  *
3370  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3371  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3372  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3373  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3374  *	that power save is disabled.
3375  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3376  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3377  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3378  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3379  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3380  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3381  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3382  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3383  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3384  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3385  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3386  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3387  *	The callback can sleep.
3388  *
3389  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3390  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3391  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3392  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3393  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3394  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3395  *	The callback can sleep.
3396  *
3397  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3398  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3399  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3400  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3401  *
3402  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3403  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3404  *
3405  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3406  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3407  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3408  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3409  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3410  *
3411  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3412  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3413  *	this notification.
3414  *	The callback can sleep.
3415  *
3416  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3417  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3418  *	The callback can sleep.
3419  *
3420  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3421  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3422  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3423  *	The callback must be atomic.
3424  *
3425  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3426  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3427  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3428  *	should be set as well.
3429  *	The callback can sleep.
3430  *
3431  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3432  *	The callback can sleep.
3433  *
3434  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3435  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3436  *
3437  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3438  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3439  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3440  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3441  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3442  *	This callback can sleep.
3443  *
3444  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3445  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3446  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3447  *	callback can sleep.
3448  *
3449  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3450  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3451  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3452  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3453  *
3454  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3455  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3456  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3457  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3458  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3459  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3460  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3461  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3462  *	The callback can sleep.
3463  *
3464  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3465  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3466  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3467  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3468  *	in @sta_state.
3469  *	The callback can sleep.
3470  *
3471  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3472  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3473  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3474  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3475  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3476  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3477  *	Must be atomic.
3478  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3479  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3480  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3481  *
3482  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3483  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3484  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3485  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3486  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3487  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3488  *	The callback can sleep.
3489  *
3490  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3491  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3492  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3493  *	The callback can sleep.
3494  *
3495  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3496  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3497  *	required function.
3498  *	The callback can sleep.
3499  *
3500  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3501  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3502  *	required function.
3503  *	The callback can sleep.
3504  *
3505  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3506  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3507  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3508  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3509  *	The callback can sleep.
3510  *
3511  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3512  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3513  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3514  *	TSF synchronization.
3515  *	The callback can sleep.
3516  *
3517  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3518  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3519  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3520  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3521  *	The callback can sleep.
3522  *
3523  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3524  *
3525  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3526  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3527  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3528  *	The callback can sleep.
3529  *
3530  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3531  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3532  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3533  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3534  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3535  *
3536  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3537  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3538  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3539  *
3540  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3541  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3542  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3543  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3544  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3545  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3546  *	The callback can sleep.
3547  *
3548  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3549  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3550  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3551  *	completion of the channel switch.
3552  *
3553  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3554  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3555  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3556  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3557  *
3558  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3559  *
3560  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3561  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3562  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3563  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3564  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3565  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3566  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3567  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3568  *	must be accepted in this case.
3569  *	This callback may sleep.
3570  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3571  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3572  *
3573  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3574  *
3575  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3576  *
3577  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3578  *	queues before entering power save.
3579  *
3580  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3581  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3582  *	The callback can sleep.
3583  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3584  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3585  *	The callback must be atomic.
3586  *
3587  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3588  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3589  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3590  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3591  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3592  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3593  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3594  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3595  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3596  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3597  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3598  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3599  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3600  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3601  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3602  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3603  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3604  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3605  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3606  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3607  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3608  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3609  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3610  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3611  *	This callback must be atomic.
3612  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3613  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3614  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3615  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3616  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3617  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3618  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3619  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3620  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3621  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3622  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3623  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3624  *	This callback must be atomic.
3625  *
3626  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3627  *
3628  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3629  *
3630  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3631  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3632  *
3633  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3634  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3635  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3636  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3637  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3638  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3639  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3640  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3641  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3642  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3643  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3644  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3645  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3646  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3647  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3648  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3649  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3650  *
3651  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3652  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3653  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3654  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3655  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3656  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3657  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3658  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3659  *
3660  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3661  *	This callback may sleep.
3662  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3663  *	This callback may sleep.
3664  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3665  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3666  *	channel context with different settings
3667  *	This callback may sleep.
3668  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3669  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3670  *	This callback may sleep.
3671  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3672  *	unbound from vif.
3673  *	This callback may sleep.
3674  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3675  *	another, as specified in the list of
3676  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3677  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3678  *	This callback may sleep.
3679  *
3680  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3681  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3682  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3683  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3684  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3685  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3686  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3687  *
3688  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3689  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3690  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3691  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3692  *	This callback may sleep.
3693  *
3694  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3695  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3696  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3697  *
3698  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3699  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3700  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3701  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3702  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3703  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3704  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3705  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3706  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3707  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3708  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3709  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3710  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3711  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3712  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3713  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3714  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3715  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3716  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3717  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3718  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3719  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3720  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3721  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3722  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3723  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3724  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3725  *
3726  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3727  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3728  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3729  *
3730  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3731  *	and hardware limits.
3732  *
3733  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3734  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3735  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3736  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3737  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3738  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3739  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3740  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3741  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3742  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3743  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3744  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3745  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3746  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3747  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3748  *	the function call.
3749  *
3750  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3751  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3752  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3753  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3754  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3755  *
3756  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3757  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3758  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3759  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3760  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3761  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3762  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3763  *	changed parameters.
3764  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3765  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3766  *	this call.
3767  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3768  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3769  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3770  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3771  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3772  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3773  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3774  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3775  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3776  *
3777  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3778  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3779  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3780  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3781  *	This callback may sleep.
3782  */
3783 struct ieee80211_ops {
3784 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3785 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3786 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3787 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3788 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3789 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3790 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3791 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3792 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3793 #endif
3794 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3795 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3796 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3798 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3799 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3801 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3802 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3803 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3804 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3805 				 u32 changed);
3806 
3807 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3808 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3809 
3810 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3812 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3813 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3814 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3815 				 u64 multicast);
3816 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3818 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3819 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3820 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3821 		       bool set);
3822 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3823 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3824 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3825 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3826 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3827 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3828 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3829 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3830 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3833 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3834 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3835 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3836 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3837 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3838 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3839 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3842 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3843 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3844 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3845 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3847 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3848 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3850 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3852 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3854 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3855 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3856 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3857 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3859 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3860 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3861 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3862 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3863 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3864 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3865 				struct dentry *dir);
3866 #endif
3867 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3869 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3870 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3871 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3872 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3873 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3874 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3875 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3876 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3877 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3878 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3879 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3880 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3881 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3882 			      u32 changed);
3883 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3884 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3885 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3886 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3887 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3888 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3889 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3890 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3891 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3892 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3893 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3894 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3895 			u64 tsf);
3896 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3897 			   s64 offset);
3898 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3900 
3901 	/**
3902 	 * @ampdu_action:
3903 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3904 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3905 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3906 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3907 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3908 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3909 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3910 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3911 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3912 	 *
3913 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3914 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3915 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3916 	 *
3917 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3918 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3919 	 *
3920 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3921 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3922 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3923 	 *
3924 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3925 	 *
3926 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3927 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3928 	 * if the session can start immediately.
3929 	 *
3930 	 * The callback can sleep.
3931 	 */
3932 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3934 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3935 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3936 		struct survey_info *survey);
3937 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3938 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3939 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3940 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 			    void *data, int len);
3942 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3943 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3944 			     void *data, int len);
3945 #endif
3946 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3947 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3948 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3950 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3951 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3952 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3953 
3954 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3957 				 int duration,
3958 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3959 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3961 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3962 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3964 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3965 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3967 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3969 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3970 
3971 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3973 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3974 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3975 				      bool more_data);
3976 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3978 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3979 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3980 					bool more_data);
3981 
3982 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3983 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3984 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3987 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3989 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3990 
3991 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3993 				  u16 duration);
3994 
3995 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997 
3998 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4000 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4002 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4004 			       u32 changed);
4005 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4007 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4008 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4010 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4011 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4013 				  int n_vifs,
4014 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4015 
4016 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4018 
4019 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4020 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4021 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4022 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4023 #endif
4024 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4026 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4027 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4030 
4031 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4032 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4033 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4034 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4035 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4037 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4038 
4039 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4040 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4041 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4042 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4043 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4044 			   int *dbm);
4045 
4046 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4048 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4049 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4050 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4051 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4054 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4055 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4056 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4057 
4058 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4059 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4060 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4061 
4062 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4063 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4064 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4065 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4067 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4070 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4072 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4073 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4075 			    u8 instance_id);
4076 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4077 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4078 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4079 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4080 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4081 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4082 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4083 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4084 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4085 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4086 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4089 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4090 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4092 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4093 };
4094 
4095 /**
4096  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4097  *
4098  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4099  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4100  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4101  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4102  * @priv_data_len.
4103  *
4104  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4105  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4106  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4107  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4108  *
4109  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4110  */
4111 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4112 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4113 					   const char *requested_name);
4114 
4115 /**
4116  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4117  *
4118  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4119  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4120  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4121  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4122  * @priv_data_len.
4123  *
4124  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4125  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4126  *
4127  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4128  */
4129 static inline
4130 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4131 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4132 {
4133 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4134 }
4135 
4136 /**
4137  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4138  *
4139  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4140  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4141  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4142  *
4143  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4144  *
4145  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4146  */
4147 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4148 
4149 /**
4150  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4151  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4152  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4153  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4154  */
4155 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4156 	int throughput;
4157 	int blink_time;
4158 };
4159 
4160 /**
4161  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4162  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4163  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4164  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4165  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4166  */
4167 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4168 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4169 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4170 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4171 };
4172 
4173 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4174 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4175 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4176 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4177 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4178 const char *
4179 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4180 				   unsigned int flags,
4181 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4182 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4183 #endif
4184 /**
4185  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4186  *
4187  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4188  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4189  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4190  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4191  *
4192  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4193  *
4194  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4195  */
4196 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4197 {
4198 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4199 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4200 #else
4201 	return NULL;
4202 #endif
4203 }
4204 
4205 /**
4206  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4207  *
4208  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4209  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4210  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4211  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4212  *
4213  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4214  *
4215  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4216  */
4217 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4218 {
4219 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4220 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4221 #else
4222 	return NULL;
4223 #endif
4224 }
4225 
4226 /**
4227  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4228  *
4229  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4230  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4231  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4232  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4233  *
4234  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4235  *
4236  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4237  */
4238 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4239 {
4240 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4241 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4242 #else
4243 	return NULL;
4244 #endif
4245 }
4246 
4247 /**
4248  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4249  *
4250  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4251  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4252  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4253  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4254  *
4255  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4256  *
4257  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4258  */
4259 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4260 {
4261 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4262 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4263 #else
4264 	return NULL;
4265 #endif
4266 }
4267 
4268 /**
4269  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4270  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4271  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4272  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4273  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4274  *
4275  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4276  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4277  *
4278  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4279  */
4280 static inline const char *
4281 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4282 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4283 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4284 {
4285 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4286 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4287 						  blink_table_len);
4288 #else
4289 	return NULL;
4290 #endif
4291 }
4292 
4293 /**
4294  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4295  *
4296  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4297  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4298  *
4299  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4300  */
4301 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4302 
4303 /**
4304  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4305  *
4306  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4307  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4308  * before calling this function.
4309  *
4310  * @hw: the hardware to free
4311  */
4312 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4313 
4314 /**
4315  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4316  *
4317  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4318  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4319  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4320  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4321  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4322  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4323  *
4324  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4325  */
4326 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4327 
4328 /**
4329  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4330  *
4331  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4332  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4333  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4334  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4335  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4336  *
4337  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4338  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4339  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4340  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4341  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4342  *
4343  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4344  *
4345  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4346  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4347  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4348  * @napi: the NAPI context
4349  */
4350 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4351 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4352 
4353 /**
4354  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4355  *
4356  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4357  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4358  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4359  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4360  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4361  *
4362  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4363  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4364  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4365  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4366  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4367  *
4368  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4369  *
4370  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4371  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4372  */
4373 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4374 {
4375 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4376 }
4377 
4378 /**
4379  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4380  *
4381  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4382  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4383  *
4384  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4385  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4386  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4387  *
4388  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4389  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4390  */
4391 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4392 
4393 /**
4394  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4395  *
4396  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4397  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4398  *
4399  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4400  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4401  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4402  *
4403  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4404  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4405  */
4406 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4407 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4408 {
4409 	local_bh_disable();
4410 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4411 	local_bh_enable();
4412 }
4413 
4414 /**
4415  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4416  *
4417  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4418  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4419  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4420  *
4421  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4422  *
4423  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4424  * each other.
4425  *
4426  * @sta: currently connected sta
4427  * @start: start or stop PS
4428  *
4429  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4430  */
4431 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4432 
4433 /**
4434  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4435  *                                  (in process context)
4436  *
4437  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4438  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4439  * applies.
4440  *
4441  * @sta: currently connected sta
4442  * @start: start or stop PS
4443  *
4444  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4445  */
4446 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4447 						  bool start)
4448 {
4449 	int ret;
4450 
4451 	local_bh_disable();
4452 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4453 	local_bh_enable();
4454 
4455 	return ret;
4456 }
4457 
4458 /**
4459  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4460  * @sta: currently connected station
4461  *
4462  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4463  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4464  * connected station was received.
4465  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4466  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4467  * be serialized.
4468  */
4469 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4470 
4471 /**
4472  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4473  * @sta: currently connected station
4474  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4475  *
4476  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4477  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4478  * from a connected station was received.
4479  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4480  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4481  * serialized.
4482  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4483  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4484  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4485  * checks.
4486  */
4487 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4488 
4489 /*
4490  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4491  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4492  */
4493 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4494 
4495 /**
4496  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4497  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4498  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4499  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4500  *
4501  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4502  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4503  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4504  *
4505  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4506  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4507  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4508  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4509  *
4510  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4511  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4512  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4513  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4514  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4515  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4516  *
4517  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4518  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4519  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4520  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4521  * use this API.
4522  */
4523 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4524 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4525 
4526 /**
4527  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4528  *
4529  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4530  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4531  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4532  *
4533  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4534  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4535  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4536  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4537  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4538  */
4539 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4540 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4541 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4542 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4543 			    int max_rates);
4544 
4545 /**
4546  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4547  *
4548  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4549  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4550  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4551  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4552  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4553  * slow stations to starve).
4554  *
4555  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4556  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4557  */
4558 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4559 					   u32 thr);
4560 
4561 /**
4562  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4563  *
4564  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4565  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4566  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4567  *
4568  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4569  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4570  * @info: tx status information
4571  */
4572 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4573 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4574 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4575 
4576 /**
4577  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4578  *
4579  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4580  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4581  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4582  *
4583  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4584  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4585  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4586  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4587  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4588  *
4589  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4590  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4591  */
4592 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4593 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4594 
4595 /**
4596  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4597  *
4598  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4599  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4600  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4601  *
4602  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4603  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4604  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4605  *
4606  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4607  * @status: tx status information
4608  */
4609 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4610 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4611 
4612 /**
4613  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4614  *
4615  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4616  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4617  * specific skbs.
4618  *
4619  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4620  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4621  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4622  *
4623  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4624  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4625  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4626  * @info: tx status information
4627  */
4628 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4629 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4630 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4631 {
4632 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4633 		.sta = sta,
4634 		.info = info,
4635 	};
4636 
4637 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4638 }
4639 
4640 /**
4641  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4642  *
4643  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4644  *
4645  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4646  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4647  * for a single hardware.
4648  *
4649  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4650  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4651  */
4652 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4653 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4654 {
4655 	local_bh_disable();
4656 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4657 	local_bh_enable();
4658 }
4659 
4660 /**
4661  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4662  *
4663  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4664  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4665  *
4666  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4667  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4668  *
4669  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4670  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4671  */
4672 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4673 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4674 
4675 /**
4676  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4677  *
4678  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4679  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4680  * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4681  * 802.11 frames.
4682  *
4683  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4684  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4685  * calls in the same tx status family.
4686  *
4687  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4688  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4689  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4690  */
4691 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4692 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4693 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4694 
4695 /**
4696  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4697  *
4698  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4699  * connected STA.
4700  *
4701  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4702  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4703  */
4704 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4705 
4706 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4707 
4708 /**
4709  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4710  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4711  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4712  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4713  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4714  *	should be ignored.
4715  */
4716 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4717 	u16 tim_offset;
4718 	u16 tim_length;
4719 
4720 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4721 };
4722 
4723 /**
4724  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4725  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4726  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4727  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4728  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4729  *
4730  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4731  * obtain the beacon template.
4732  *
4733  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4734  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4735  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4736  * applicable, the CSA count.
4737  *
4738  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4739  *
4740  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4741  */
4742 struct sk_buff *
4743 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4744 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4745 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4746 
4747 /**
4748  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4749  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4750  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4751  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4752  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4753  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4754  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4755  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4756  *
4757  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4758  * obtain the beacon frame.
4759  *
4760  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4761  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4762  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4763  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4764  *
4765  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4766  *
4767  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4768  */
4769 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4770 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4771 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4772 
4773 /**
4774  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4775  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4776  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4777  *
4778  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4779  *
4780  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4781  */
4782 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4783 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4784 {
4785 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4786 }
4787 
4788 /**
4789  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4790  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4791  *
4792  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4793  * This function is called implicitly when
4794  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4795  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4796  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4797  *
4798  * Return: new csa counter value
4799  */
4800 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4801 
4802 /**
4803  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4804  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4805  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4806  *
4807  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4808  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4809  *
4810  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4811  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4812  */
4813 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4814 
4815 /**
4816  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4817  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4818  *
4819  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4820  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4821  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4822  */
4823 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4824 
4825 /**
4826  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4827  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4828  *
4829  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4830  */
4831 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4832 
4833 
4834 /**
4835  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4836  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4837  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4838  *
4839  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4840  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4841  *
4842  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4843  *
4844  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4845  */
4846 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4847 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4848 
4849 /**
4850  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4851  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4852  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4853  *
4854  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4855  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4856  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4857  *
4858  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4859  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4860  *
4861  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4862  */
4863 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4864 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4865 
4866 /**
4867  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4868  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4870  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4871  *	if at all possible
4872  *
4873  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4874  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4875  * BSSID and address is used.
4876  *
4877  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4878  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4879  *
4880  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4881  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4882  *
4883  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4884  */
4885 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4886 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4887 				       bool qos_ok);
4888 
4889 /**
4890  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4891  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4892  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4893  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4894  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4895  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4896  *
4897  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4898  * hardware.
4899  *
4900  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4901  */
4902 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4903 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4904 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4905 				       size_t tailroom);
4906 
4907 /**
4908  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4909  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4910  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4911  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4912  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4913  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4914  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4915  *
4916  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4917  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4918  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4919  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4920  */
4921 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4922 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4923 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4924 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4925 
4926 /**
4927  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4928  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4929  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4930  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4931  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4932  *
4933  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4934  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4935  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4936  *
4937  * Return: The duration.
4938  */
4939 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4940 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4941 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4942 
4943 /**
4944  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4945  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4946  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4947  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4948  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4949  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4950  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4951  *
4952  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4953  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4954  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4955  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4956  */
4957 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4958 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4959 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4960 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4961 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4962 
4963 /**
4964  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4965  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4966  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4967  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4968  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4969  *
4970  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4971  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4972  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4973  *
4974  * Return: The duration.
4975  */
4976 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4977 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4978 				    size_t frame_len,
4979 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4980 
4981 /**
4982  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4983  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4984  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4985  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4986  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4987  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4988  *
4989  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4990  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4991  *
4992  * Return: The duration.
4993  */
4994 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4995 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4996 					enum nl80211_band band,
4997 					size_t frame_len,
4998 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4999 
5000 /**
5001  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5002  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5003  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5004  *
5005  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5006  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5007  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5008  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5009  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5010  *
5011  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5012  * frames are available.
5013  *
5014  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5015  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5016  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5017  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5018  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5019  * use common code for all beacons.
5020  */
5021 struct sk_buff *
5022 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5023 
5024 /**
5025  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5026  *
5027  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5028  *
5029  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5030  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5031  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5032  */
5033 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5034 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5035 
5036 /**
5037  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5038  *
5039  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5040  * from the given packet.
5041  *
5042  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5043  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5044  *	with this P1K
5045  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5046  */
5047 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5048 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5049 {
5050 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5051 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5052 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5053 
5054 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5055 }
5056 
5057 /**
5058  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5059  *
5060  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5061  * and transmitter address.
5062  *
5063  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5064  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5065  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5066  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5067  */
5068 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5069 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5070 
5071 /**
5072  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5073  *
5074  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5075  * in the packet.
5076  *
5077  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5078  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5079  *	encrypted with this key
5080  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5081  */
5082 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5083 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5084 
5085 /**
5086  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5087  *
5088  * @pos: start of crypto header
5089  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5090  * @pn: PN to add
5091  *
5092  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5093  * the packet payload)
5094  *
5095  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5096  * point to the crypto header)
5097  */
5098 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5099 
5100 /**
5101  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5102  *
5103  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5104  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5105  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5106  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5107  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5108  *
5109  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5110  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5111  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5112  *
5113  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5114  * can be done concurrently.
5115  */
5116 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5117 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5118 
5119 /**
5120  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5121  *
5122  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5123  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5124  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5125  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5126  * @seq: new sequence data
5127  *
5128  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5129  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5130  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5131  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5132  *
5133  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5134  * can be done concurrently.
5135  */
5136 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5137 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5138 
5139 /**
5140  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5141  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5142  *
5143  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5144  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5145  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5146  *
5147  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5148  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5149  */
5150 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5151 
5152 /**
5153  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5154  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5155  * @keyconf: new key data
5156  *
5157  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5158  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5159  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5160  *
5161  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5162  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5163  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5164  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5165  *
5166  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5167  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5168  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5169  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5170  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5171  * of the reconfiguration.
5172  *
5173  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5174  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5175  *
5176  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5177  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5178  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5179  * the key that's being replaced.
5180  */
5181 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5182 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5183 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5184 
5185 /**
5186  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5187  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5188  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5189  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5190  * @gfp: allocation flags
5191  */
5192 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5193 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5194 
5195 /**
5196  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5197  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5198  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5199  *
5200  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5201  */
5202 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5203 
5204 /**
5205  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5206  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5207  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5208  *
5209  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5210  */
5211 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5212 
5213 /**
5214  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5215  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5216  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5217  *
5218  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5219  *
5220  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5221  */
5222 
5223 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5224 
5225 /**
5226  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5227  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5228  *
5229  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5230  */
5231 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5232 
5233 /**
5234  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5235  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5236  *
5237  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5238  */
5239 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5240 
5241 /**
5242  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5243  *
5244  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5245  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5246  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5247  * any context, including hardirq context.
5248  *
5249  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5250  * @info: information about the completed scan
5251  */
5252 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5253 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5254 
5255 /**
5256  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5257  *
5258  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5259  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5260  *
5261  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5262  */
5263 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5264 
5265 /**
5266  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5267  *
5268  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5269  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5270  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5271  * while associating, for instance.
5272  *
5273  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5274  */
5275 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5276 
5277 /**
5278  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5279  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5280  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5281  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5282  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5283  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5284  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5285  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5286  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5287  */
5288 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5289 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5290 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5291 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5292 };
5293 
5294 /**
5295  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5296  *
5297  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5298  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5299  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5300  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5301  *
5302  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5303  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5304  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5305  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5306  */
5307 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5308 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5309 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5310 				  void *data);
5311 
5312 /**
5313  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5314  *
5315  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5316  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5317  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5318  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5319  * be used.
5320  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5321  *
5322  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5323  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5324  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5325  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5326  */
5327 static inline void
5328 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5329 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5330 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5331 				    void *data)
5332 {
5333 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5334 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5335 				     iterator, data);
5336 }
5337 
5338 /**
5339  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5340  *
5341  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5342  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5343  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5344  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5345  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5346  *
5347  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5348  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5349  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5350  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5351  */
5352 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5353 						u32 iter_flags,
5354 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5355 						    u8 *mac,
5356 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5357 						void *data);
5358 
5359 /**
5360  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5361  *
5362  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5363  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5364  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5365  *
5366  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5367  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5368  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5369  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5370  */
5371 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5372 					      u32 iter_flags,
5373 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5374 						u8 *mac,
5375 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5376 					      void *data);
5377 
5378 /**
5379  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5380  *
5381  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5382  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5383  * function for them.
5384  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5385  *
5386  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5387  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5388  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5389  */
5390 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5391 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5392 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5393 				       void *data);
5394 /**
5395  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5396  *
5397  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5398  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5399  *
5400  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5401  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5402  */
5403 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5404 
5405 /**
5406  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5407  *
5408  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5409  * workqueue.
5410  *
5411  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5412  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5413  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5414  */
5415 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5416 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5417 				  unsigned long delay);
5418 
5419 /**
5420  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5421  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5422  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5423  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5424  *
5425  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5426  *
5427  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5428  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5429  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5430  */
5431 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5432 				  u16 timeout);
5433 
5434 /**
5435  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5436  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5437  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5438  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5439  *
5440  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5441  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5442  * from any context.
5443  */
5444 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5445 				      u16 tid);
5446 
5447 /**
5448  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5449  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5450  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5451  *
5452  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5453  *
5454  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5455  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5456  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5457  */
5458 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5459 
5460 /**
5461  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5462  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5463  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5464  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5465  *
5466  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5467  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5468  * can be called from any context.
5469  */
5470 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5471 				     u16 tid);
5472 
5473 /**
5474  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5475  *
5476  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5477  * @addr: station's address
5478  *
5479  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5480  *
5481  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5482  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5483  */
5484 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5485 					 const u8 *addr);
5486 
5487 /**
5488  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5489  *
5490  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5491  * @addr: remote station's address
5492  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5493  *
5494  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5495  *
5496  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5497  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5498  *
5499  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5500  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5501  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5502  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5503  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5504  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5505  *      is not reliable.
5506  *
5507  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5508  */
5509 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5510 					       const u8 *addr,
5511 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5512 
5513 /**
5514  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5515  * @hw: the hardware
5516  * @pubsta: the station
5517  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5518  *
5519  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5520  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5521  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5522  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5523  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5524  *
5525  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5526  * manner.
5527  *
5528  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5529  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5530  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5531  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5532  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5533  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5534  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5535  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5536  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5537  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5538  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5539  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5540  * woke up while blocked or not.
5541  */
5542 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5543 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5544 
5545 /**
5546  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5547  * @pubsta: the station
5548  *
5549  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5550  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5551  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5552  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5553  *
5554  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5555  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5556  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5557  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5558  *
5559  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5560  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5561  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5562  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5563  */
5564 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5565 
5566 /**
5567  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5568  * @pubsta: the station
5569  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5570  *
5571  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5572  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5573  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5574  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5575  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5576  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5577  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5578  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5579  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5580  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5581  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5582  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5583  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5584  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5585  */
5586 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5587 
5588 /**
5589  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5590  *
5591  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5592  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5593  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5594  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5595  *
5596  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5597  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5598  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5599  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5600  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5601  * attempts.
5602  *
5603  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5604  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5605  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5606  * them to 0.
5607  *
5608  * @pubsta: the station
5609  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5610  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5611  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5612  */
5613 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5614 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5615 
5616 /**
5617  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5618  *
5619  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5620  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5621  *
5622  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5623  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5624  */
5625 bool
5626 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5627 
5628 /**
5629  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5630  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5631  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5632  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5633  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5634  *
5635  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5636  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5637  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5638  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5639  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5640  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5641  *
5642  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5643  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5644  * set_key callback.
5645  */
5646 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5647 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5648 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5649 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5650 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5651 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5652 				      void *data),
5653 			 void *iter_data);
5654 
5655 /**
5656  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5657  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5658  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5659  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5660  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5661  *
5662  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5663  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5664  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5665  * in removal process will be skipped.
5666  *
5667  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5668  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5669  */
5670 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5671 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5672 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5673 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5674 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5675 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5676 					  void *data),
5677 			     void *iter_data);
5678 
5679 /**
5680  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5681  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5682  * @iter: iterator function
5683  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5684  *
5685  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5686  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5687  * places while calling into the driver.
5688  *
5689  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5690  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5691  * removed.
5692  *
5693  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5694  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5695  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5696  * or not.
5697  */
5698 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5699 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5700 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5701 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5702 		     void *data),
5703 	void *iter_data);
5704 
5705 /**
5706  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5707  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5708  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5709  *
5710  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5711  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5712  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5713  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5714  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5715  * %NULL.
5716  *
5717  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5718  */
5719 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5720 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5721 
5722 /**
5723  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5724  *
5725  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5726  *
5727  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5728  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5729  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5730  */
5731 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5732 
5733 /**
5734  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5735  *
5736  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5737  *
5738  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5739  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5740  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5741  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5742  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5743  *
5744  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5745  * without connection recovery attempts.
5746  */
5747 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5748 
5749 /**
5750  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5751  *
5752  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5753  *
5754  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5755  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5756  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5757  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5758  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5759  *
5760  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5761  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5762  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5763  * disconnect normally later.
5764  *
5765  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5766  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5767  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5768  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5769  */
5770 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5771 
5772 /**
5773  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5774  *	rssi threshold triggered
5775  *
5776  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5777  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5778  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5779  * @gfp: context flags
5780  *
5781  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5782  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5783  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5784  */
5785 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5786 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5787 			       s32 rssi_level,
5788 			       gfp_t gfp);
5789 
5790 /**
5791  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5792  *
5793  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5794  * @gfp: context flags
5795  */
5796 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5797 
5798 /**
5799  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5800  *
5801  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5802  */
5803 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5804 
5805 /**
5806  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5807  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5808  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5809  *
5810  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5811  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5812  */
5813 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5814 
5815 /**
5816  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5817  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5818  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5819  *
5820  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5821  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5822  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5823  */
5824 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5825 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5829  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5830  */
5831 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5832 
5833 /**
5834  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5835  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5836  */
5837 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5838 
5839 /**
5840  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5841  *
5842  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5843  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5844  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5845  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5846  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5847  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5848  *
5849  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5850  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5851  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5852  */
5853 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5854 				  const u8 *addr);
5855 
5856 /**
5857  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5858  * @pubsta: station struct
5859  * @tid: the session's TID
5860  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5861  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5862  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5863  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5864  *
5865  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5866  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5867  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5868  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5869  */
5870 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5871 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5872 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5873 
5874 /**
5875  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5876  *
5877  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5878  * buffer.
5879  *
5880  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5881  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5882  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5883  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5884  */
5885 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5886 
5887 /**
5888  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5889  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5890  * @addr: station mac address
5891  * @tid: the rx tid
5892  */
5893 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5894 				 unsigned int tid);
5895 
5896 /**
5897  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5898  *
5899  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5900  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5901  * reordering.
5902  *
5903  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5904  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5905  *
5906  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5907  * @addr: station mac address
5908  * @tid: the rx tid
5909  */
5910 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5911 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5912 {
5913 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5914 		return;
5915 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5916 }
5917 
5918 /**
5919  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5920  *
5921  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5922  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5923  * reordering.
5924  *
5925  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5926  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5927  *
5928  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5929  * @addr: station mac address
5930  * @tid: the rx tid
5931  */
5932 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5933 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5934 {
5935 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5936 		return;
5937 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5938 }
5939 
5940 /**
5941  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5942  *
5943  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5944  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5945  *
5946  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5947  *
5948  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5949  * @addr: station mac address
5950  * @tid: the rx tid
5951  */
5952 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5953 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5954 
5955 /* Rate control API */
5956 
5957 /**
5958  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5959  *
5960  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5961  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5962  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5963  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5964  *	to be filled in
5965  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5966  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5967  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5968  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5969  *	RTS threshold
5970  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5971  *	if the selected rate supports it
5972  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5973  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5974  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5975  */
5976 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5977 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5978 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5979 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5980 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5981 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5982 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5983 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5984 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5985 	bool bss;
5986 };
5987 
5988 /**
5989  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5990  */
5991 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5992 	/**
5993 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5994 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5995 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5996 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5997 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5998 	 */
5999 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6000 };
6001 
6002 struct rate_control_ops {
6003 	unsigned long capa;
6004 	const char *name;
6005 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6006 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6007 
6008 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6009 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6010 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6011 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6012 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6013 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6014 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6015 			    u32 changed);
6016 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6017 			 void *priv_sta);
6018 
6019 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6020 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6021 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6022 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6023 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6024 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6025 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6026 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6027 
6028 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6029 				struct dentry *dir);
6030 
6031 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6032 };
6033 
6034 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6035 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6036 				 int index)
6037 {
6038 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6039 }
6040 
6041 static inline s8
6042 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6043 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6044 {
6045 	int i;
6046 
6047 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6048 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6049 			return i;
6050 
6051 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6052 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6053 
6054 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6055 	return 0;
6056 }
6057 
6058 static inline
6059 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6060 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6061 {
6062 	unsigned int i;
6063 
6064 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6065 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6066 			return true;
6067 	return false;
6068 }
6069 
6070 /**
6071  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6072  *
6073  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6074  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6075  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6076  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6077  *
6078  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6079  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6080  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6081  */
6082 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6083 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6084 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6085 
6086 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6087 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6088 
6089 static inline bool
6090 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6091 {
6092 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6093 }
6094 
6095 static inline bool
6096 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6097 {
6098 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6099 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6100 }
6101 
6102 static inline bool
6103 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6104 {
6105 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6106 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6107 }
6108 
6109 static inline bool
6110 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6111 {
6112 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6113 }
6114 
6115 static inline bool
6116 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6117 {
6118 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6119 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6120 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6121 }
6122 
6123 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6124 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6125 {
6126 	if (p2p) {
6127 		switch (type) {
6128 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6129 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6130 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6131 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6132 		default:
6133 			break;
6134 		}
6135 	}
6136 	return type;
6137 }
6138 
6139 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6140 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6141 {
6142 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6143 }
6144 
6145 /**
6146  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6147  *
6148  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6149  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6150  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6151  *
6152  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6153  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6154  * matching GroupId management frame.
6155  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6156  */
6157 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6158 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6159 
6160 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6161 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6162 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6163 
6164 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6165 
6166 /**
6167  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6168  *
6169  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6170  *
6171  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6172  *
6173  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6174  * applicable.
6175  */
6176 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6177 
6178 /**
6179  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6180  * @vif: virtual interface
6181  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6182  * @gfp: allocation flags
6183  *
6184  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6185  */
6186 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6187 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6188 				    gfp_t gfp);
6189 
6190 /**
6191  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6192  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6193  * @vif: virtual interface
6194  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6195  * @band: the band to transmit on
6196  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6197  *
6198  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6199  */
6200 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6201 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6202 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6203 
6204 /**
6205  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6206  *
6207  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6208  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6209  *
6210  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6211  *
6212  * private:
6213  *
6214  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6215  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6216  */
6217 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6218 	u32 next_tsf;
6219 	bool has_next_tsf;
6220 
6221 	u8 absent;
6222 
6223 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6224 	struct {
6225 		u32 start;
6226 		u32 duration;
6227 		u32 interval;
6228 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6229 };
6230 
6231 /**
6232  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6233  *
6234  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6235  * @data: NoA tracking data
6236  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6237  *
6238  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6239  */
6240 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6241 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6242 
6243 /**
6244  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6245  *
6246  * @data: NoA tracking data
6247  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6248  */
6249 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6250 
6251 /**
6252  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6253  * @vif: virtual interface
6254  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6255  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6256  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6257  * @gfp: allocation flags
6258  *
6259  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6260  */
6261 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6262 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6263 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6264 
6265 /**
6266  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6267  *
6268  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6269  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6270  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6271  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6272  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6273  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6274  *
6275  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6276  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6277  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6278  *
6279  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6280  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6281  *
6282  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6283  */
6284 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6285 
6286 /**
6287  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6288  *
6289  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6290  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6291  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6292  *
6293  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6294  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6295  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6296  *
6297  * @sta: the station
6298  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6299  */
6300 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6301 
6302 /**
6303  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6304  *
6305  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6306  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6307  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6308  *
6309  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6310  *
6311  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6312  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6313  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6314  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6315  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6316  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6317  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6318  *
6319  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6320  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6321  */
6322 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6323 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6324 
6325 /**
6326  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6327  * (in process context)
6328  *
6329  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6330  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6331  *
6332  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6333  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6334  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6335  */
6336 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6337 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6338 {
6339 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6340 
6341 	local_bh_disable();
6342 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6343 	local_bh_enable();
6344 
6345 	return skb;
6346 }
6347 
6348 /**
6349  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6350  *
6351  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6352  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6353  *
6354  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6355  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6356  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6357  */
6358 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6359 
6360 /**
6361  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6362  *
6363  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6364  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6365  *
6366  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6367  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6368  */
6369 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6370 
6371 /* (deprecated) */
6372 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6373 {
6374 }
6375 
6376 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6377 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6378 
6379 /**
6380  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6381  *
6382  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6383  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6384  *
6385  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6386  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6387  *
6388  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6389  * this TXQ internally.
6390  */
6391 static inline void
6392 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6393 {
6394 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6395 }
6396 
6397 /**
6398  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6399  *
6400  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6401  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6402  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6403  *
6404  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6405  * internally.
6406  */
6407 static inline void
6408 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6409 		     bool force)
6410 {
6411 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6412 }
6413 
6414 /**
6415  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6416  *
6417  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6418  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6419  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6420  * next_txq().
6421  *
6422  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6423  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6424  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6425  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6426  * again.
6427  *
6428  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6429  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6430  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6431  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6432  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6433  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6434  *
6435  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6436  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6437  */
6438 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6439 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6440 
6441 /**
6442  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6443  *
6444  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6445  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6446  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6447  *
6448  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6449  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6450  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6451  */
6452 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6453 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6454 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6455 
6456 /**
6457  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6458  *
6459  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6460  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6461  *
6462  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6463  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6464  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6465  * @gfp: allocation flags
6466  */
6467 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6468 				   u8 inst_id,
6469 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6470 				   gfp_t gfp);
6471 
6472 /**
6473  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6474  *
6475  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6476  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6477  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6478  *
6479  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6480  * @match: match event information
6481  * @gfp: allocation flags
6482  */
6483 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6484 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6485 			      gfp_t gfp);
6486 
6487 /**
6488  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6489  *
6490  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6491  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6492  *
6493  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6494  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6495  *          information.
6496  * @len: frame length in bytes
6497  */
6498 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6499 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6500 			      int len);
6501 
6502 /**
6503  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6504  *
6505  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6506  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6507  *
6508  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6509  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6510  * @len: frame length in bytes
6511  */
6512 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6513 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6514 			      int len);
6515 /**
6516  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6517  *
6518  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6519  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6520  * hardware or firmware.
6521  *
6522  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6523  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6524  */
6525 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6526 
6527 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6528